JP6901662B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

Further, such a game table is known to have a display means.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game table having a characteristic display means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
A production means that can execute the first production,
Display means that can display the timer display and
It is a game table equipped with
The timer display is a display including a display in which the timer value is subtracted.
The timer display is a display including the timer value and a frame display surrounding the timer value.
The timer display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first effect is an effect executed in connection with the timer display.
In the first effect, one of the timer displays displayed in the first aspect is displayed with two or more increases , and at least one timer of the two or more increased timer displays is displayed. The display is an effect of being displayed in the second aspect.
At least the color of the frame display is different between the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console having a feature in the display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is the flowchart of the process, (c) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in a button effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice production. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the machine 2000 of the holding, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. , (C) show a portable game machine 4000 including a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home-use video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, the game console according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage plate 108, and the like. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate may be provided to detect that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the card unit is instructed to return the player's balance. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 4). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 4) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 4). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 4), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight when the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure start port 232 is reached. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are opened is easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other size, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second feature, which is a variable starting area, is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is a fixed starting area. Figure There are more game balls that enter the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, there are a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 and game nails 238. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate a human right arm and a forearm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2nd special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control unit 400 is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the button sensor 426 that detects the presses of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And, are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, nine types of special figures, "special figure A" to "special figure I", are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as stop symbols for the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that you can expect to get a ball in one round, but you can not expect to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 4 out of 15 rounds While you can expect to get the ball out in the round, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds It is a real 4R-RUB, "Special figure F" is a 5R normal big hit symbol, "Special figure G" is a 2R big hit It is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation that cannot be expected to get a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure (probability change of the normal figure). For example, the winning probability of the normal-figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal-figure low-probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the normal-figure high-probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and if the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5B, six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and "Special Figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns with the same number other than "3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described so far (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 5D shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of the special figure in the RAM 308 may be referred to as the reserved number storage area for the special figure. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, in the start information storage unit for the special figure, a plurality of types of start information are set as one set, and these start information are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. It is read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the detection signal storage area before the previous time, which is divided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the starting port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying fluctuation / stop, a timer for measuring a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read and add 1 to set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The on / off drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the timer probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 5 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The 7-segment LED is turned on / off, and the driving control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation / shortness). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special figure 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and also deletes the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the hold of the special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 is held in the special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. The command type can be specified), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, which includes information indicating a number, etc., includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300 depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure pre-reading process). The figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored in the special figure. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-judgment process may be performed using a special table for pre-judgment instead of the table used for the hit / fail judgment.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-judgment process may be performed using a special table for pre-judgment instead of the table used for the hit / fail judgment.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the look-ahead is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, "special figure I" (off) is stored in the storage area "hold 1" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I" is stored in the storage area "hold 2" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Out of place) is remembered.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 9B, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and the pre-reading result. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the hit / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability table for determining whether or not it is correct, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability table for determining whether or not it is correct or not. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, when the special figure is in the high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 10A is referred to, and the special figure is in the low probability state. In that case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 10 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is incorrect, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value are used as the basis. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11A is referred to, and the special figure is based on the winning / failing result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is a special figure. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 following step S415, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S503.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543, which is next to step S541, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. The first UI unit 280 can be displayed in a manner in which the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal on the left side thereof, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is notified that the symbol variation is being displayed. ing. When the symbol is stopped, the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigator character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The navigator character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigator character YM (for example, pre-reading notice, notice in the symbol change display, and hold of the symbol change display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is adjusted according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol variation display. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". .. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, the rules may be changed (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → ... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the movable objects, is given the letters "Large", and the second is given the letters "Board". A large board behavior character 224 Gb, a third large board behavior character 224 Gc with the characters "shake", and a fourth large board behavior character 224 Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd can be rotated about the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the production.

Further, above the decorative pattern display device 208, a Senryobako accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be overlapped with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryobako accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed while the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or more of them are performed. It may be configured so that it can be used. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the effect itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is invisible. The decorative member may be made transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be made visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. In FIG. 14B, since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game. The mode may change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, a 7-segment display, an LED, a dot matrix display device, or the like). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Some or all of the combinations of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, the rules may be changed (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → ... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E and Senryobako accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

15 (A1) to 15 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, from the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, until the characters "large", "board", "swing", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryobako accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryobako accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are the Senryobako accessory. Compared to the case where it does not overlap with 224H, it is considered to be more difficult to see. The Senryobako accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the Senryobako accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the Senryobako accessory 224H.

In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made easier to see by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

15 (C1) to 15 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (C1) to 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided instead of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs change during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 15 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 15 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 15 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. LED arrays are accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 15 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

15 (E1) to 15 (E2) show that the family crest accessory 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are considered to be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a).

FIG. 15 (F1) shows how the Senryobako accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryobako accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps the front side of the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped because the Senryo box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryobako accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryobako accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, a retracting operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid to be visually recognized by the sliding movement. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M slides upward and the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides upward. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the enlarged left symbol. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed only, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

15 (I1) to 15 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (I1) to 15 (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

15 (K1) to 15 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to 15 (K4), the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 15 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

FIG. 15 (K2) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide and move to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the evacuation position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2'), the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 15 (K3) to 15 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N match the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. A display is performed in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N rotate in a direction opposite to the rotation direction about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1'), the display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 15 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub display device 208S performs the cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 step by step, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 step by step. ..

In FIG. 16, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold are shown. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) can also be applied. In the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 1 and the display of the number of second hold in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 in special figure 1. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon, and so on. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 16 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 16 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 16 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because it is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is hidden. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of fluctuation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the start of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the movement animation of the hold icon → decoration. It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol has started.

In FIG. 16 (3), it is shown that the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second reserved number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 16 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Is started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 16 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". In addition, there may be cases where the effect of promoting from the previously displayed notice (for example, "opportunity") to the later displayed notice (for example, "extreme heat") (for example, "no") is not performed. .. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also called tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that urges the effect button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Intense heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed and the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat" may be the same, or after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed, in the balloon. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 16 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. The size (larger or smaller) may be different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), the game is played. It is shown that a person is pressing the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 16 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "It's intense heat" are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May occur. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation validity period is long without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it has passed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 16 (17). 7 ”is displayed as a stop and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to 16 (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to 16 (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 fluctuates. The icon h0 is left and the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 16 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior may be performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior is performed. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if both the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The start of movement of the four large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to 16 (24), it is better to perform a series of effects performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light guide plate IL. It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when no production is performed.

FIG. 17 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26), the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has been started since the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. It should be noted that the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. Further, the operation validity period in the first button effect after the development of the super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after the development of the super reach, or after the development of the super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large panel The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may also be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss may be performed without performing the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38), and further, the effect display that causes a loss may be displayed. After that, the revival effect may be displayed so that a big hit effect display is performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 17 (39), the Senryobako accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 17 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. However, it can be set as appropriate. In addition, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryobako accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

FIG. 17 (41) shows how the light guide plate IL has finished emitting light. After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the Senryobako accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 17 (44), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 17 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game that was started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 18 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. Further, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 18 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the jackpot end effect. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (warning display) is performed to call attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is finished.

FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probabilistic state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative design also has a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is held. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 18 (58) to 18 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character "bonus XX" indicating the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" indicating that fact is displayed.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please right-handed" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state in which the first jackpot game is completed and shifted, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state in which the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting left. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 18 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

In FIG. 18 (63), it is shown that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is held for four times. That is, in the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special drawing 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special drawing 2 are turned on. Is displayed. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 19 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 16 to 17, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 19 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the decorative symbol is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not determined that the symbol has been confirmed and stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 19 (46b), the variation icon h0 disappears in the animation display. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 20, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice effect is started. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 20 (3)). You may want to start the countdown (afterwards).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 20 (3) to 20 (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (8), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20 (11), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 20 (12). In this way, a cut-in display consisting of the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the more likely it is to become a big hit. In addition, the pseudo-ream symbol may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to announce that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (14), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

FIG. 20 (3a) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (2). In this production example, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 20 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIGS. 20 (10a), (11a), and (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 20 (10), (11), and (14), respectively.

Then, after "decoration 7" and "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, as shown in FIG. 20 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 20 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the design on the right has changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". It should be noted that the design on the right may remain as "decoration 6" so as not to change. Then, as shown in FIGS. 20 (16a) to 20 (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 20 (3a) to 20 (17a) foretells that the second pseudo-ream will be started. In addition, foretelling the start of the second pseudo-ream means that the start of the first pseudo-ream is also foretold. It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-reams has been announced. In the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but other types of notice and the occurrence of the effect may be announced.

FIG. 20 (7b) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (6). 20 (7b) to 20 (11b) correspond to FIGS. 20 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (7b), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8b-1), the face image of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze" added instead of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, a display other than the timer notice display TM1 may be used to attract attention to the notice. The means for attracting attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed is not limited to the display, but may be performed by voice or a lamp, or by combining two or more of the display, voice, and lamp. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the character of the lord is erased, as shown in FIG. 20 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20 (12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this production example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding effect (pseudo-ream) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be cases where the corresponding effect is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer display is being counted down on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice unrelated to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

FIG. 21 (a1) shows another production example following FIG. 20 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed to face the variable icon h0 and point the sword. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigator character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 21 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is performed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, a reach state by the "decoration 7" occurs as shown in FIG. 21 (a7). As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect of notifying that the advance notice will be performed.

FIG. 21 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started at "30:00", that is, a certain advance notice effect 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Suggests that is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". In this way, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer advance notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the countdown time may be set. The shorter the value, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b2), about 8 seconds have passed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative symbol, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21 (b3), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left and displayed in the first UI unit 280. Along with frame-out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

After that, FIG. 21 (b4) shows how it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4), the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character and the enemy role Animation display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is continued even after the timer advance notice effect shifts to the reach state.

FIG. 21 (b4'-2) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02:37" after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have passed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect is started. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer advance notice effect. After that, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 21 (b5'), the timer display is changed to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 21 (b6'). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7'), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-mentioned production example, as an effect performed as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, an example in which a change display of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other effects may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give a notice.

FIG. 21 (b6 ″ ″) shows another production example following FIG. 21 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ""), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6 ″ ″ -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to perform a notice display, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit. It is shown that the cut-in display is switched to indicate that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high are displayed. In addition, this cut-in display may be a notice display in which the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that two or more notices are displayed as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21 (c1) to 21 (c2) show how the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the timer display is changed to the timer display to call attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 as an operation means for the production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (c2), a lever image 136V imitating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, indicating that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, but the above-mentioned button effect may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, the button image 136a in the default mode, and the button image 136a having a color different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). , Button image 136a with character notation (for example, "super heat", "expected large", etc.) and characters added to the default mode, button image 136a with a size different from the default mode (for example, big button effect and mini button) (Direction), the number of button images 136a displayed is larger than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) is performed). Alternatively, the operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of the button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.), and the response according to the operation of the effect button 136 As the display, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, and a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.)).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21 (d1) to 21 (d4) show how the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 21 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is performed. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and the frame is out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (d1), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d2), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (d3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of counting down in the timer notice production, it is shown that the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd as the production movable body operate, but the role of the family crest. The object 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H may operate, and two or more of the first large board behavior accessory Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory Gd, the family crest accessory 224E, and the Senryobako accessory 224H operate. You may.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a chance-up notice, a look-ahead notice, or the like may be given between the start of the timer advance notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed. It is not necessary to display the count-up animation. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is difficult to see. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 22 (4a), the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22 (4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the timer addition effect is completed) elapses, the first pseudo continuous effect is produced. Is started, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (7), and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

In this production example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, it is easier to make a big hit than when the time is not added, but the reliability of the big hit is increased. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 22 (1b) to 22 (6b) show a state in which the timer addition effect is performed by the conversation notice instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1b), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1b), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 22 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be started. The timer notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and the character of the grandfather moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather with the character display "It is an addition of 10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed. As a result, it is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM. The timer display countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather also partially overlaps the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4b), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this production example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (4b'-1) to FIG. 22 (4b'-2). The conversation notice may be continuously performed until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing at which the conversation notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

The production example shown in FIGS. 22 (1c) to 22 (6c) shows another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (1c), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer advance notice effect described above has started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (1c), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 22 (1c), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the above-mentioned operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the character of. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT corresponds to the elapsed time. It has decreased so much. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified to that effect. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (3c), the display of the old man's conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "10 seconds is added" indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the time may not be added in the timer display. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT may be temporarily erased, and then the character display may be changed to "Add 10 seconds." The remaining time display meter MT may be changed to the character display of "Add 10 seconds" without displaying that the gauge disappears. Further, on condition that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the characters "10 seconds are added" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time at the time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (4c), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice may end. The timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display ends.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22 (6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 22 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to "09:85" after adding 10 seconds to the time in the timer display.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown in the timer advance notice production is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3'), the countdown update display in the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the operation valid period. (Leave the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), time the timer internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4'), inside. The timing result (for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4'), the remaining 2.00 seconds) may be reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is updated during the operation valid period. Without displaying (keeping the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), the time is measured internally, and as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4 ″), the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not reflect the internal counting result, and as shown in FIG. 22 (3c ″), the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 indicates the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing changed to the character display, the internal time measurement result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c ″)) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

23 (1d) to FIG. (2d) show another production example of FIGS. 22 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 23 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is "attention to the timer notice". As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 23 (1d).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather described above is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer advance notice effect, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

FIG. 23 (1e) shows another production example of FIG. 23 (1d). In FIG. 23 (1e), instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, the timer display is set to "00" by performing the scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1. You may want to pay attention to the effect that is performed as a result of ": 00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23 (1e), the characters "attention to timer notice" are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The production example shown in FIGS. 23 (1f) to 23 (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and shows how the added time is counted down by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Shown. FIG. 23 (1f) is an production example following FIG. 22 (3), in which the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1 on the display screen after the additional time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this addition timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The additional timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 23 (2f) shows how the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. Animation may be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 23 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notice display TM1, but the timer advance display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other, for example. , As shown in FIG. 23 (2f ′), the additional timer display TM2 may overlap with the timer advance notice display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 23 (2f ″), the timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap. The additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 23 (2f) to 23 (4f), the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen. .. Here, after the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or the timing at which the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started. , The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 23 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (5f'), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the character "attention" to attract attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), a pseudo-ream symbol may appear in the middle symbol and the pseudo-ream may be performed in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. This is suggested, and the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. The pseudo-continuous symbol may not appear when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, but is displayed on the additional timer display TM2 separate from the timer notice display TM1 to perform the countdown. ing. The notification of the time to be added may be the notification of the total value of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, the value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining timer display TM2 is displayed. A value with 7 seconds added may be displayed. The additional timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

23 (3fa) to 23 (8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown on the addition timer display TM2 are performed at the same time. It shows the situation. FIG. 23 (3fa) is an production example following FIG. 23 (2f). After the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the timer is starting. That is, in this production example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. It should be noted that the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 may be the time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds so that the addition of 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued as shown in FIGS. 23 (3f) to 23 (6f), and in FIG. 23 (7fa), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-ream is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is displayed is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa'), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to give a notice. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine pattern CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance notice effect, it may be suggested that the advance notice effect or the big hit is performed in addition to the pseudo-ren. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC overlap with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be split.

FIG. 24 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and the second hold number display , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that time will be added in the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol has stopped. The left symbol may be stopped after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The display timing of the stocked notice icon is not limited to the case where the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed along with the decorative design, and various types such as temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display due to the effect, or a look-ahead notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (3), it is shown in the first UI unit 280 that the table on which the navigation character YM stands rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icons are displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and is shown to be stocked. In the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol has stopped. , The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the state in which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked is shown. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a combination of lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the confirmation is displayed with. The timing at which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 and the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed may be the same, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is set in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (6), it is shown that one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is performed. Further, the timer notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps with the timer advance display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of a notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display that overlaps the timer notice only during the execution of a certain effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285, foretelling that the notice icon MI1 of the clock will be used. .. In addition, "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted at the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is erased and the timing at which the count-up animation display is started may be the same, or the count-up animation is displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is erased. It may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased after the display of the count-up animation is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

FIG. 25 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (A1) to 25 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A3), a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. Even if the character "addition" is displayed, the timer display time may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after displaying the character "attention" to encourage attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2). The balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, the character "still" indicating that the timer notice effect is continued is displayed, and then the display of the timer notice display TM1 is added. It is also possible to switch to the display of "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added and notify the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the character "still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. You may want to display "seconds". Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25 (A3) is displayed, the display as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-2) may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 being performed to "00:00". It is shown that it is. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated. The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) to 25 (B5) show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B1), a balloon in which the characters “subtraction” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". In addition, the balloon display of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and is set to "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B3), the time is shortened by displaying the shortened animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed (timer shortening effect). It is not necessary to display the shortened animation. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and it is shown that the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5), the character "attention" to call attention to the notice is displayed instead of the timer display, and then the middle A notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5'), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is started. The timing at which the character "attention" on the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character "attention" may be displayed. The pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed after the display starts, or the character "attention" may be displayed after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed. May start displaying. Note that the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or changes in the timer advance notice effect. For example, the timer may change during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the pseudo-ream notification is likely to be performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer advance notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC, etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-ream may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (C1) to 25 (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "06:99" is displayed and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (C1), a balloon displaying the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is increased. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from white to red, for example, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a notice with extremely high reliability may be given as a notice to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (D1) to 25 (D5) show an effect example in which the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), a balloon in which the characters “stop” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. The timing at which the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted may be the same, or the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or the balloon with the characters "stop" may be started to be displayed after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains "06:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows how the second decorative symbol variable display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Has been done. In addition, below the second decorative symbol, "x2" indicating that the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), a balloon in which the characters "restart" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be restarted after the effect is completed. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) as compared with that before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to 2 or more, and conversely, the timer. When three notice display TM1s are displayed and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the originally displayed timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds, and the two timer notice display TM1 are increased, 10 There are two timer notice display TM1s that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is reduced, the total value of the times notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice display TM1s that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice display TM1s that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 26 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26 (A1) to 26 (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A4), the sub-display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (B1) to 26 (B7) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the characters "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The time is added to the production. It should be noted that at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, and the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may start after being located on the front side of the substantially center of the device 208, or the count-up may be started before the sub-display device 208S is located on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B4) to 26 (B5), the sub-display device 208S performs a countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is reduced by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes "0 seconds", the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. It will be updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1, but the timer display time is set to be identifiable. May be good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (B6), the sub-display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of "Restart" indicating that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. The sub-display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 26 (B7) shows a state in which the sub-display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and the timer display is "14:23" at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B7). After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub-display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts descending may be the same, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be restarted after the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Further, the timing at which the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is restarted, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or the display of "Restart" may be started on the sub-display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Further, the timing at which the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same, and after the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 26 (C1) to 26 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is notified. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (C1), the timer notice display TM1 has started to display a suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and sucks from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how it is doing is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C2), the sub-display device 208S moves upward to overlap a part of the display area of the sub-display device 208S with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Navi character YM has a surprised expression on the appearance.

FIG. 26 (C3) shows how the sucking animation is continuously displayed. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of this "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the above-mentioned count-up animation has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 completely moves from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is shown that the timer is heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. When the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (animation accompanying the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but it is not necessary to perform the animation in particular. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C5), when the display of "+10 seconds" is completely sucked by the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 26 (C6), the timer. In the notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 27 (A1) to 27 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27 (A1) to 27 (A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the family crest accessory 224E, No. A part of 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H will be described without illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (A2), the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, the timer display is displayed by operating the 2nd large board behavioral character 224Gb and the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd out of the 1st large board behavioral character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral character 224Gd. Although it is notified that the second is added, the addition time may be different depending on the number of operating accessories among the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, for example. When all of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this production example, it is notified that the timer display is added with 10 seconds by operating the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd only once. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated 3 times, the timer display is added by 30 seconds. You may.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to 27 (B4) show an example of a timer addition effect using the family crest accessory 224E. In the production example shown in FIGS. 27 (B1) to 27 (B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) will be used for explanation. The illustrations of the 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Move in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the overlapping family crest accessory 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding the time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, it is notified that the family crest accessory 224E operates only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display, but the addition time may differ depending on the number of operations. Often, for example, when the family crest accessory 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (C1) to 27 (C6) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 27 (C1) to 27 (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, "1" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. Further, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, and a timer display countdown is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continued without interrupting the countdown.

Further, the character "additional 10 seconds" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the time to be added to the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 27 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time in which 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in the second position. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. 2 The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing of starting the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the timing of starting the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. To. It should be noted that the timer display countdown in a state where the display of "15:00" is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27 (C4)). May be restarted. A case where the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than a case where the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device. The susceptibility to a big hit may be the same, or it may be configured so as not to be a big hit.

FIG. 28 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A4) shows another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer advance notice effect has been started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, two timer notice effects are performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is set as the first timer advance notice effect, and the timer advance notice effect performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is used as the second timer advance notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions, as shown in FIG. 28 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each 208N is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. To. At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L also displays a timer of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other, making it difficult to see. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 28 (A3) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As the movement of 208N is performed, the displayed coordinates are maintained and the display is scrolled. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls the display to the right in response to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display of "20:00" to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decoration. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 28 (A3) shows. As shown, the display of "20:00" will be displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first. It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the big hits may be the same or less likely to be big hits).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3) show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a) is applied, but in this production example, instead of the family crest accessory 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above is provided with reference to. In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (B1) to 28 (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, about a part of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H. The description will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the timer notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, the characters "+10" are displayed by the simple display by the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28 (B1), due to the rotation of the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are removed. It overlaps the rotation area and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" previously displayed only on the POV display 224I is displayed. Will also be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character "+10" is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "+10" are displayed so as to match the display of the characters "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, it may be possible to display a sense of unity between the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters "+10" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this production example, the font of the numbers displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the font of the numbers displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

Then, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the display stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 28 (B3). At this time, the display of the character "+10" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to see than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this production example, after that, 10 seconds are added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to 28 (C5) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the production example shown in FIGS. 28 (C1) to 28 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. It should be noted that all of the variable icon h0, the first decorative symbol, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlap with the POV display 224I, which makes it more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate, reaches a constant rotation speed, and is set to a constant speed rotation, as shown in FIG. 28 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer display is displayed for 10 seconds. It is notified that the addition will be performed.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C3), an effect that the timer display bursts is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C4), the timer display after being added is "15:00". Is displayed. In this production example, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

After that, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is started to decrease, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easy to be a big hit. May be the same, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

In the timer advance notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, the countdown from the beginning to the end of the countdown after the change is internally performed. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time until the change may be counted down before the change, and the time until the change may be counted down after the change (for example, if the change occurs 10 seconds after the start of the countdown). If you count down 10 seconds and display "Attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). Moreover, the display of the countdown and the time for internally counting down may match.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 29, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

FIG. 29 (1) shows another production example following FIG. 17 (25). FIG. 29 (1) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current progress of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29 (2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of how the super reach has been developed as shown in FIG. 29 (1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The display may be started when the display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the start point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of Boy's character BOY. It can be said that this Boy's character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. I am informing you that. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to be displayed and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the character BOY of Boy may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the announcement by displaying the Boy character BOY is given, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the checkpoint, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be enlarged or displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the Sabohani character SBH is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates the button or the operation valid period elapses, but the character SBH may not be stopped.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (11) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode showing a state of riding a large motorcycle while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It informs that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 17 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. You may. The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the period. Further, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 29 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, or the effect button may be displayed. It may be always displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating 136, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (14), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. Notifies that a notice has been given by displaying an image. The timing at which the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the character SBH of the lord starts to be displayed, or the character of the sabohani after the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, or the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started. It should be noted that even if the effect button 136 is not operated when the effect button 136 is configured so that the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without being operated, the effect button 136 is not operated. It is possible to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred in the same manner as when 136 is operated, or it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and a chance-up notice is given. Only a part of the occurrence may be notified (for example, only the character "UP" is displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (16), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (18) displays the lever image 136V and the balloon. A balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH to notify that the notice by lever production has started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started while the balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (plastic card) of the chance up meter CMT, but the whole may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and conversely, the chance may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped during the display of the chance up meter CMT. May be good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (20), the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the lever is operated by the player or the operation valid period has elapsed.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29 (23), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to No. 4 The large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, but may be displayed. It should be noted that the effect performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated (1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryobako accessory 224H are activated, and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is emitted. The effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208) and the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated are the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryobako accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative design. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. The operations of FIGS. 29 (23) to (24) are performed as described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 (38) to (44).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), it is notified that the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is hidden, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is completed. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the character SBH of Sabohani and the placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance-up meter CMT described above, the chance-up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may not be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT is displayed or not.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the checkpoint may be moved or the checkpoint may be deleted during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to the position before the current position (the position indicating the past) or the position ahead (indicating the future). You may move to position).

Further, the effect itself in the chance-up meter CMT may be a mini-game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the checkpoint, the effect may be performed to increase the chance. Further, for example, an enemy character may be placed at the checkpoint, and an effect may be provided in which the chance is increased when the enemy character fights against the ally character and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing the chance during the execution of the big hit game (for example, rank-up bonus, probabilistic promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance-up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by the power interruption and recovery. Further, the chance-up meter CMT itself may return to the display, but the history of the checkpoint timing and the occurrence of the chance-up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 30 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 30 (3a) is another production example following FIG. 29 (2), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (3) is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (4a), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the chance-up notice is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (5a) to (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint. It passes through CP1 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the first checkpoint CP1 are not displayed. As a result, at the first checkpoint CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the notice has ended unexploded. If the chance-up notice is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be deleted. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (7a ″), instead of the character “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, an “x” indicating that the chance-up notice was not given was displayed. May be done. In addition, even if the chance-up notice is not actually given, it is assumed that the chance-up notice has been given after the Sabohani character SBH has passed the checkpoint, and the marking or "UP" at the checkpoint is assumed. The characters may be displayed. For example, after marking at the checkpoint or hiding the characters of "UP", the markings or the characters of "UP" may be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give a notice of chance up and display markings and the characters "UP". In addition, for example, an effect of rewinding the reach effect to the beginning or halfway is performed, and then when the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or the characters "UP" are performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 30 (17b) is another production example following FIG. 29 (16), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up is not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. It passes through CP3 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the third checkpoint CP3 are not displayed. Note that FIG. 30 (19b) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b) within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. However, along with the line "Did you remove it ...", the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided is displayed. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect will be developed.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 30 (23b), the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 30 (24b). Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 30 (25b) to (29b), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to change the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the Sabohani character SBH. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears. , As shown in FIGS. 30 (28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is located at the starting point SP again. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the 4th checkpoint CP4 and the 5th checkpoint CP5 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 30 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters cheers at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice is displayed to show that the player is in the game, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. It can be said that this Copanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Copanda cheering party KPD may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by displaying the chance up character. I am informing you that I have been damaged. The timing at which the Copanda cheering party KPD starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may start displaying after the Copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the Copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by the display of the Copanda cheering party KPD, but it may not stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the fifth checkpoint CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" to the effect that the chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 30 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136V together with the display of "blow". Will be done. Further, on the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, the lever effect, which is a chance-up effect, may not be performed, and the button effect, which is an effect of operating the effect button 136, may be performed. In addition, the lever effect may be always performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 29 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 30 (23c) is another production example following FIG. 29 (22). In the lever production shown in FIGS. 29 (18) to 29 (22), the effect lever 136V was operated by the player. It is shown that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

FIG. 30 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 29 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5d), a large number of Boy character BOYs (boy groups) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of the Boy group. When this Boy character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the Boy character BOY appears alone. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up BOY group" in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and notifies that a notice has been given by displaying the character of chance-up. In this way, even if the chance-up points are the same, different chance-up effects may be performed, or the same effects may be performed at the same chance-up points.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 31 (7e) is another production example following FIG. 29 (6), and the same production as in FIG. 29 (7) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31 (8e) to 31 (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaches just before the third checkpoint CP3, and the third checkpoint CP3 is reached. Wait at that location until the chance-up notice corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. It should be noted that while the effect of the Sabohani character SBH jumping over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaching the third checkpoint CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 (for example, FIGS. 29 (9) to 9). The button effect and the like described above as shown in FIG. 15 may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second checkpoint CP2 may be marked in red and the characters "UP" may be displayed as if the effect was performed.

FIG. 31 (2f) is another production example following FIG. 29 (1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 29. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green bar, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the current progress of the reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the progress speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but it may be constant. In addition, the display mode of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is represented by a question mark so as to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT.

In FIG. 31 (3f) following FIG. 31 (2f), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (4f), the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5f), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" was displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice was given by displaying the character of the chance up. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 31 (5f) to 31 (6f), the marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31 (7f-1) to (7f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

FIG. 31 (4g') shows an example of an effect in which the boy character BOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31 (3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (4f), as shown in FIG. 31 (4g'), the chance-up meter CMT at the first checkpoint CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, an "x" indicating that the notice did not appear is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased so that no display is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4 g ″ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

FIG. 31 (2h) is yet another production example following FIG. 29 (1). In the production example shown in FIG. 31 (2h), the display mode is the same as that of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31 (2f), but the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are hidden. It differs in that. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice will start.

At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (5h), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Passing” is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the character of the chance up. At this time, a part of the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 31 (6h) to 31 (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden characters "UP" appear. Appear.

FIG. 32 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 32 (A1) to 32 (A11) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

After that, FIG. 32 (A3) shows how the chasing effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the main character, the lord, chases the unscrupulous merchant, is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance-up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (A3), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the markers MRK reach the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a pseudo-ream may occur. In addition, it is suggested that by reaching the final point, the unscrupulous merchant will be captured and it will be easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this production example, the more pseudo-reams occur, the more likely it is to become a big hit. When the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is confirmed. It should be noted that the jackpot may be confirmed when the number of pseudo-reams is other than four, and for example, when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 and 4, the jackpot may be confirmed. The number of pseudo-reams that confirms the jackpot is less likely to occur than the number of pseudo-reams that are confirmed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode. Even if the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant and the timing of displaying the characters "continue" and the timing of switching the display of the first checkpoint CP1 from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue" are the same. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continue" after the character "continue" is displayed together with the display that the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant. After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue", the characters "continue" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the hero's lord and the unscrupulous merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A8), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the hero's lord is chasing the vice merchant has been changed, and the expression of the vice merchant who has been able to afford it has become impatient.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (A10), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (A11), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "secured" and the state in which the main character, the lord, has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and thus the pseudo-ream has been performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time. Further, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the reach state is reached with "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 32 (B1) to 32 (B14), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and the appearance of notifying the timing when the notice of chance-up occurs is shown. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 31 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 and second checkpoint CP2 indicate that a notice of chance up may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon displaying the characters "opportunity" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM gives a notice of the navigator character. In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the character "opportunity" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but is a chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B4), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1. Then, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the characters "Chance up or not" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that the navigation character YM has given notice of the chance up. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B5), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. In addition, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM have been changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the characters "super heat" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation notice, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16 (10) is displayed is displayed together with the character of the grandfather. The conversation image CI2 of this grandfather is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (B6), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second checkpoint CP2 is in a standby state.

After that, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B7).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32 (B8) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (B9), as shown in FIG. 32 (B10), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "super heat" is displayed. The text "It's right" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is a display mode emphasized by a thick golden line, and it is more likely to be a big hit than the case of the normal display mode of the outer frame. Is being notified. In addition, in the chance-up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather to gold, a balloon with the characters "chance-up gold frame" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK. , Notifies that the notice of chance up in the conversation notice has been made. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. If the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 may or may not be displayed. When the old man's conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the chance up notice has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or it may be notified, or only a part thereof may be notified. (For example, displaying only the characters "UP").

The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32 (B11) shows how the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps with the grandfather's conversation image CI2, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32 (B11) from the beginning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B12), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. The appearance is shown. This shows the history of the occurrence of a chance-up notice. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also completed. The display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may end after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state in the “decoration 7”. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance-up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B14), the reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

In addition, although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is terminated when it reaches the reach state, the production may continue even if it is in the reach state, and it continues even if it shifts to the super reach state. You may do so. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is completed. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, an effect by the chance up meter CMT, which is different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT that is continuously being executed, may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always start. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is possible, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be started when the effect button 136 is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 33 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 33, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A5), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but it is shown that the effect is erased in the middle.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 were reached respectively, the display of the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 was erased because the notice of the chance up corresponding to them did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2) displays a cut-in indicating that the character of the grandfather holding the energy drink is speaking "fight". The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Also, when this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is completed because the notice that the chance up is likely to be a big hit is given rather than the notice of the chance up related to the chance up meter CMT is given. There is. The display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT may always end in the middle, or the chance-up meter CMT may or may not end in the middle. At this time, for example, the content of the subsequent effect may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or does not end, or the same content may be performed. .. Further, the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up notice occurs at all the checkpoints and the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. It may be. Alternatively, the case where the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "blow" to show that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and "decoration 7" is displayed. It is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be a big hit. In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 33 (A4'), "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Will be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and it is shown that the hero's lord has defeated the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 33 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A1). Specifically, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a) displays a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying, "I will rewrite the reach." The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is produced with other contents. When this cut-in display is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, also in this production example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance-up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2a), the variable icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33 (A3a), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance-up meter CMT, the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 appear, and they are red respectively. In addition to being marked with, the characters "UP" are displayed. That is, in reality, the notice of chance up corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the notice of chance up corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not given, but both are expressed as if they were done and a big hit. It is shown that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 33 (A3a'-1) shows another production example following FIG. 33 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), the chance to show that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 is increased. A notice is displayed to inform that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The child panda cheering party KPD may or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode thereof is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 33 (A3a'-2) is an effect example following FIG. 33 (A2a), and shows an effect example different from that of FIG. 33 (A3a'-1). In the production example shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 33 (A3a'-1). That is, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2) is a chance-up meter different from the chance-up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. As shown in 30 (30b) and described above, it is a chance-up meter CMT displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a'-2), it is shown that the Copanda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that passed after shifting to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the Copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that the chance up is announced. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be located at the start point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located in and start from the end of the SP swordsman reach.

FIG. 33 (A3a ″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a ″) shows how the full rotation reach starts. The full rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and since it is not necessary to give the player a feeling of expectation any more, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. ), The chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the jackpot will be confirmed when the full rotation reach starts, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the 5th checkpoint CP5. , The placard may be labeled with a "V" indicating that it will be a big hit. The timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP after the full rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

33 (A2b) to 33 (A3b) show another production example following FIG. 33 (A1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It should be noted that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and the overlapping effects on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 are completed. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 33 (B1) to 33 (B4), the production by the chance up meter CMT was started, but the production by the chance up meter CMT was completed because the result of the loss was displayed in the middle. It is shown.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 was reached, the red marking and "UP" were not displayed on the 1st checkpoint CP1 because the corresponding chance-up notice did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (B1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the first checkpoint CP1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (B3), it is notified that the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, resulting in a loss. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays that the Sabohani character SBH is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33 (B3'), although "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol and it is notified that the character will be lost, the character SBH of Sabohani is finally set in the chance up meter CMT. The state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (B4), the first decorative symbol is shaken and changed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 34, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 34 (A1) to 34 (A5), the chance-up meter CMT is temporarily erased during the production by the chance-up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. The character SBH of Sabohani is shown to have started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, FIG. 34 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 darkens the display to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL easier to see. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display was interrupted due to the darkening display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up illumination emission" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The light emitting of the light guide plate IL continues.

FIG. 34 (A4) shows that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown.

FIG. 34 (A5) shows how the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move.

In this production example, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL was performed as a notice of chance up in the reach production, but the effect is not limited to the above. For example, the character SBH of Sabohani is at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT. It may be applied in the production of reaching and inciting whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the production that incites whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is also applied in the production that incites whether it will be a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops or a loss is displayed). You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to 34 (B6) show how the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen, and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that a notice of chance up is being made. Further, in this production example, a guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the up key and the down key of the operation key unit 137 and the character "Hide the meter by operating the arrow keys" are displayed, and the player can display the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach starts, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. Is being notified.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34 (B4). .. After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 34 (B6). At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is in the position where it should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect of the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a good point. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (B6'), when the effect between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 is omitted and the chance up meter CMT display is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be located in front of the second checkpoint CP2 and wait at that position until the timing corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 34 (B6) and 34 (B6'), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY, and the "UP" is displayed. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (B6), the characters "UP" overlap with the Sabohani character SBH, making it difficult to see.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 34 (B1) to 34 (B6), the display / non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed and then hidden by the player's operation, the chance-up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next production by the chance-up meter CMT is performed.

Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but as shown in FIG. 34 (B4), for example, the chance up meter CMT is first hidden. It may be configured to be in the state of being.

FIG. 35 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter. FIG. 35 shows an example of an effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

In FIG. 35, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (A1) to 35 (A2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A1), two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variable icon h0 in between. In this production example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and have the same display mode as those described above. In the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1), the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b, the second checkpoints CP2a and CP2b and the third checkpoints CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first checkpoints CP1a (CP1b) to third checkpoints CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Here, the checkpoint indicated by the first chance-up meter CMTa and the checkpoint indicated by the second chance-up meter CMTb are intended for the same chance-up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed, but only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed as compared with the case where only one chance up meter is displayed. The case where it is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit, or the ease of being a big hit (reliability) may be the same. Further, when the effect is performed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different. For example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb is higher. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2), in response to the fact that the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears, " A balloon with the words "Chance up BOY passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is notified that the chance up notice has been given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2'), the first chance-up meter CMTa displays the characters "Chance-up BOY passage" in the balloon, and the reliability of the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the character BOY of the balloon.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (A2 ″), when the appearance of the Boy character BOY and the appearance of the Boy character BOY singing a speech bubble are displayed as a rare notice, the first chance. The characters "Chance Up BOY Passed" are displayed on the balloon of the upmeter CMTa, and the characters "Chance Up Nose" indicating that a rare notice has occurred are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be good.

In this production example, the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb have the same traveling speed of the markers MRKa and MRKb, but they may proceed at different speeds. Further, in this production example, the balloon is displayed by both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

35 (A2a-1) to 35 (A2a-2) show another production example following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is erased. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, if one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit than it is, or it may be more likely to be a big hit when it is not erased. Further, the reliability may differ depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

35 (A2b-1) to 35 (A2b-2) show still another production example following FIG. 35 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-1) following FIG. 35 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the jackpot. It can be said to be an aspect. It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed by only one of the two chance up meters, or may be performed by both.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a balloon having a low reliability from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb, which is erased and displays a highly reliable balloon, is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Further, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (B1) to 35 (B2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (B1), the first chance-up meter CMTa has three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1a, second checkpoint CP2a, third checkpoint CP3a). Have been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoints. The timing of the chance-up notice and start corresponding to any of CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first checkpoint CP1a, the second checkpoint CP2a, the third checkpoint CP3a, the fourth checkpoint CP4b, and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are arranged in chronological order. , 1st checkpoint CP1a, 4th checkpoint CP4b, 2nd checkpoint CP2a, 5th checkpoint CP5b, 3rd checkpoint CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a and the character BOY of the boy appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the Boy character BOY has begun humming. In response to this, the second chance-up meter CMTb displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up humming" in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, informing that the chance-up notice has been given.

In this production example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, the chance-up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the non-displayed chance-up meter is given. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint on a chance-up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that does not notify when one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even if the checkpoint is notified. Good.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35 (C1) to 35 (C4) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variable icon h0 in between. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the second chance-up meter CMTa is a meter that shows the progress of the entire reach effect, and one checkpoint (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates the points at which the reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the checkpoint, the period from the checkpoint to the checkpoint, or the period from the checkpoint to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this production example, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as the first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as the second period. Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 31 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 29 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa has a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1, second checkpoint CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C2), it is shown that the button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started. In addition, on the first chance-up meter CMTa, the characters "UP" indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred at the first checkpoint CP1 are displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. It is shown. The second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first checkpoint CP1 and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , It is shown that the cut-in is displayed to show that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. When the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased, only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (C4), a cut-in image of the panda is displayed and a state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4 and fifth checkpoint CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It has been shown that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is proceeding from the development point CPA to the final point GP.

FIG. 36 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 36 (A1) to 36 (A7) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A1), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed, and it is shown that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged in this chance-up meter CMT. , It is informed that pseudo-ream may occur at each checkpoint. Then, in this chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A4), it is shown that the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant missed it, it is shown that the Senryobako is recovered and the product develops into reach. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is indicated by the letter "R" indicating that the question mark has changed to the reach state. It has switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is terminated in the middle, and as shown in FIG. 36 (A6), the display of the pseudo-continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. The frame is out below the display area, and the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed. In this way, it may be configured so that the chance up meter CMT can reach the end is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the checkpoint is completed in the middle. In addition, the susceptibility to big hits may differ depending on the checkpoint reached.

Further, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 36 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is terminated in the middle, as shown in FIGS. 36 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2), the chance-up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out outside the display screen.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 36 (B1) to 36 (B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is used between the start of the reach production and the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B1), it is shown that the reach effect of “decoration 7” has been changed to reach. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using this chance up meter CMT is performed until the shift to the super reach or the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 in the reach production, a notice of chance up corresponding to each checkpoint is given. Is being performed, and the characters "UP" to that effect are displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left below the display area. At the same time as the frame is out, it is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B3), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also difficult to see because at least a part of them are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to progress while the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are operating, but the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavioral object 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36 (B3), a balloon with the characters "chance-up large board behavior" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role. It is informing that the notice of chance up by the thing 224Gd has been made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT overlaps the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 36 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position. At the timing when the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished, the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol. The design overlaps with the chance up meter CMT, but before the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first is After the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the 1st decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. Further, the context of the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT may not be changed before and after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (B7), it develops into super reach.

FIG. 37 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 37 (A1) to 37 (A5), another production unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with the chance-up meter CMT while the production using the chance-up meter CMT is being executed. It is shown how it is done. Here, another effect may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or another effect may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (A1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance-up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice production that has nothing to do with the chance up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even while the treasure box BX is displayed, and continues to progress.

In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and the second checkpoint CP2 notifies that fact. Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (A4), the treasure chest BX is opened, and the characters "extreme heat" appear from the inside. This character display of "super heat" is also a notice production that has nothing to do with the notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (A5), the treasure chest BX displayed overlapping with the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT becomes easily visible.

FIG. 37 (B1) shows how other effects unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the effect using the chance-up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (B1), the wipe is made so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT during the execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that a simultaneous effect is being performed on this wipe screen WP. Here, the simultaneous production means, for example, using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a timekeeping means or a built-in timer, the same model of pachinko machine 100 mounted on the same game island, and the same production content is the same. It is a production performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous effect starts, and is erased when the simultaneous effect ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIGS. 37 (C1) to 37 (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 37 (C1) shows that the display device has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a radio device such as a transceiver outputs a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2), an error display is performed by displaying the characters "Radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (C2), this error display does not overlap with the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or a front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). It can also be applied to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened, such as (see 1). Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, or the error notification may be performed by voice or a lamp.

37 (C2a), FIG. (C2b) and FIG. (C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2b), a plurality of error displays can be displayed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the error is displayed vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that the error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, it was detected by, for example, a magnetic force detecting means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism was emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), an error display is performed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters "Magnetism detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is cut off, for example, not performing the big hit determination. .. If the power is cut off while the error is displayed and the power supply is restored after that, the symbol fluctuation stop command is issued after the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that was being executed when the power was cut off has elapsed. For example, "preparing" may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400.

FIGS. 37 (D1) to 37 (D2) show how the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with other display devices. In the production example shown in FIGS. 37 (D1) to 37 (D2), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (D1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the effect by the chance-up meter CMT is being performed. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (D1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37 (D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed are displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 37 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the sub-display device 208S displays a cut-in image of the main character, who has a balloon with the characters "Game".

In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S as an example of the display means, but the chance-up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display means. For example, a display means composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (E1), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the sub-display device 208S. It may be. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT overlaps with another display has been described, but it is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9), the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation notice. Is shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. The operation validity period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of a button image 136a2 that imitates the effect button 136a, and a remaining time display meter MT2 that indicates the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period has started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather partially overlaps with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A5). The operation valid period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation valid period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A5) to 38 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The rate at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), as shown in FIG. 38 (A9), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "it is intense heat. The characters "Zo" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "super heat", and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. ing. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a single production button operation is performed according to the button operation result for both the button production in the conversation notice and the button production by the navigation character YM. ing. In addition, the character display of "It's intense heat" displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather and the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation validity period has passed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the button effect started earlier. The production may be performed according to the result. That is, in this production example, the button production by the navigation character YM was started before the button production in the conversation notice. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-1), the production button 136 in the button production by the navigation character YM. Only the effect according to the operation of (the character display of "super heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (displayed on the old man's conversation image CI2). "It's intense heat" is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 for the second time, as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. The effect is performed according to the operation result. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (the character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather) is performed.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the button effect in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter decreases at a high speed is prioritized and produced. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136, or the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by giving priority to the button effect in which the gauge decreasing speed in the remaining time display meter is small. May be good.

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different. For example, until a certain time, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grandfather's notice image CI2 The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the blowout of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when a certain time is reached. ..

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is set to 5 seconds, but for example, the case of 5 seconds and the case of 10 seconds are prepared, and the remaining time display meter is prepared at the speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the operation valid period is selected to be 10 seconds.

In addition, in this production example, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later than the case where "super heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose production was displayed earlier is "super heat. Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is more likely to be displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the notice display displayed later is the one that is displayed later. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying the image while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, "It's intense heat" was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later than when "Intense heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect was displayed earlier. In the case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 38 (B1) to 38 (B11) show that both the timer advance effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. It has been shown that when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B2), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice effect functions as a notice of increasing the chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B4), a balloon with the characters "chance up timer notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a notice of chance up (for example, occurrence of a cut-in) is given, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice, indicating the history of the notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “04:14” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (B7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B9), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, a character of "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. According to this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohani character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the lever is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is a notice of chance up displayed in response to reaching the third checkpoint CP3, and at the same time, it is a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the target of the notice of chance up shown in the effect of the chance up meter CMT and the object of the advance notice performed as a result of the timer advance notice are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3 and the notice indicated by the character "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1 are the same. The target of the chance-up notice shown in the production by the chance-up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer notice production may be different. For example, in the production by the chance-up meter CMT, the third check The notice of chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the point CP3 is the lever image 136Va, and the notice given as a result of the timer notice effect shows the display mode of the appearing lever image 136Va with higher reliability. (For example, it may change from red to gold).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBH, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect step by step.

In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (2), it is shown that the button effect is started. In this production example, six sets of operation promotion notification images including a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image composed of the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time A second operation promotion notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged in the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and consists of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of the time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image composed of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (4), it is shown that the gauges of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 are decreasing after the operation validity period is started. Has been done. In this production example, of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation validity period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation validity period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter and the operation validity period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same length of operation validity period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (5), as shown in FIG. 39 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is the character of the copanda. It has changed to KP, and it is shown that a notice is being given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image out of the plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, and the fifth operation promotion are performed. The display mode is changed one by one with priority given to the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. The order of the operation promotion notification images that change the display mode is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136.

In this effect example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the effect button 136 is operated). The gauge is reduced faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4a), when the third remaining time display meter MT3 (effect button 136 is operated). The other remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1 has a decrease in the gauge of the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the third priority. , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4b), the sixth operation promotion notification has the lowest priority for changing the display mode when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (the effect button 136 is operated). The gauge of the remaining time display meter (corresponding to the image) may decrease faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter for accelerating the decrease of the gauge is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate one.

Further, in this effect example, the button images 136a to 136a6 are configured in each of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, a sixth button image 136a6 is used instead of the sixth button image 136a6 to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of the above may be displayed. In this case, any of the remaining time display meters of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same rate at which the gauge decreases, and as shown in FIG. 39 (4c), the sixth operation promotion notification image. The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 of the above decreases is made faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to other operation promotion notification images. It may be slowed down. With this configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect lever 136V once after operating the effect button 136 five times. You may be able to.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image decreases is displayed as the remaining time in the other operation promotion notification image. Although it is made different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), there may be two or more different gauges of the remaining time display meter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (4d), the decreasing speed of the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The fifth remaining time display meter MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 of the image is different from the third operation promotion notification image corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image than the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may decrease the gauge at a higher speed.

FIG. 40 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 40, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 40 (A1) to 40 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (A1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 frame in from the right side of the display area, the timer advance notice effects are started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display on one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display on the other timer notice display, so that the time until the countdown is completed is faster. It's different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this production example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual passage of time, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is "06:73". It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the passage of the actual time. The countdown speed of the timer advance notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state when 4 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer notice display started is shown. Can be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. After the countdown is completed, the second timer notice display TM2 is deleted by, for example, frame-out.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (A6), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this production example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice effect started earlier may be used. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 40 (B1) to 40 (B4), a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed is added to one of the timer advance notice effects. Shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 40 (B1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display (first timer notice display TM1 and second timer notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each of the timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down according to the lapse of the actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are "09:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual passage of time. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (B3), it is shown that the timer addition effect is performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (B4), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The state is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, although the two timer advance notice effects have been started, the timing at which the countdown ends is different because the time is added to one of the timer displays in the middle.

In this production example, the time is added to the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the execution of the timer notice effect. The countdown of either one of the timer displays may be paused so that the time until the countdown is completed is different.

Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice started earlier may be started. The time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice display started later is completed, the timer notice effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, and before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, by adding time (or shortening the time, pausing the countdown, etc.) to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect, the display mode of any timer notice display can be changed. You may change it.

In addition, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer advance notice effect are performed, whereby the timer advance notice related to the timer advance notice effect is performed. The time may be added to the timer display in the display for each of them.

Further, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one of the two timer advance notice effects. The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer advance effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like are performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only by one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 40 (C1) to 40 (C4), in the effect of urging the operation of any of the plurality of operating means, the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operating means is set. The state of being displayed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, the left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. , The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, corresponding to the right door image DRR, the right key image 137aR imitating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the right door image DRR, and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed in. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40 (C2), the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are reduced after the operation validity period is started. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 40 (C3) shows a state in which the left key is operated by the player to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. As a result, it is notified that the left door image DRL has been selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the door of the left door image DRL opens, and shows how the replay symbol RP appears. As a result, for example, it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40 (C2), when the right key is operated to select the right door image DRR, as shown in FIG. 40 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the right door image. The door of DRR may open and a pine pattern CC may appear. The word "Gekiatsu" is added to this pine pattern CC, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has increased dramatically.

As described above, in this production example, when the one with the faster gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability is performed, but eventually. You may select to display the same display. Further, when the one with the slower gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability may be performed.

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even if the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, wait until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and operate the right key. It may be enabled, or the right key operation may be disabled while waiting.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 41, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to 41 (A12) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice effect is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, the size may be at least small. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in a size, may be displayed in another size, or may be displayed in a different display mode itself.

In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. It should be noted that the first decorative symbol may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 which is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not change, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this production example, when the timer display becomes "03:00", the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed, but it may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice may not be displayed. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be easier to win a big hit than when the display TM1 is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A4) to 41 (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "0:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (A6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). The timer notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (A10), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 41 (A12), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this effect example, in the timer notice effect, when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numerical part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be changed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from landscape to portrait), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, the time may be added to the timer display, the time may be shortened to the timer display, and the timer display may be added. The countdown of the timer may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and newly added. The timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, a timer display or the like. When displaying the character display of "attention" in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the character display of "attention" in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in large size. It may be displayed in size. Thereby, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from a small size to a large size, but for example, the size may be changed from a small size to a medium size and then to a large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", the size changes from a medium size to a large size. It may be changed to the size. Further, although it changes from a small size to a medium size, it may not change to a large size.

Further, in this production example, when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, for example. When the remaining time in the timer display becomes "0:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size, or when the character "attention" is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention".

Further, a certain effect may be likely to appear when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-continuous symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed, but even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. You may. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily performed.

Further, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is set to a small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or the display start of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large size display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display You may not change the size of. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form due to the animation, the form of the timer display may also change due to the animation. Further, although the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the animation, the timer display may not change. Further, although the form of the timer display changes depending on the animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) to 41 (B4) shows another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "00:31" and counting down the timer display. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41 (B2) to 41 (B3), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character "attention" is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

The production example shown in FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (A3) is an example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change in the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. Shown. In the production example shown in FIGS. 42 (A1) to 42 (A3), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center of the sub display device 208. On the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. When the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (A2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the sub-display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further. Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S as a decorative symbol. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 42 (B1) to 42 (B3) is another example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the sub-display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display and a countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is located on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative pattern and timer notice display TM1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, while the sub-display device 208S is rising, the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S may be deleted before the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. It may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or it may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (B3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, or the timer notice display TM1 may be sub-displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208S, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed. In this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S, but the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. May continue to display the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced for display. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The production examples shown in FIGS. 42 (C1) to 42 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

In the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42 (C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 42 (C3) to 42 (C6), the display state of this circular meter unit changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position with the passage of time. Although a part of the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode overlaps with the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter portion is enlarged when the remaining 1 second is reached. It may be displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed may be composed of only a circular meter unit so that the timer display is not performed. Further, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 42 (C4) to 42 (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display on the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this production example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter unit. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a "continues" to the effect that a pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, characters other than "continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the process shifts to SP reach, "SP reach" or the like is displayed and SP reach is displayed. You may notify that the transition will occur. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, "attention" may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved from the top to the bottom at a low speed is started. After that, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this production example, the character "continue" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. However, for example, a question mark is added to the character "continue" to notify the pseudo-ream. The display may be performed so that the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, the big hit may be determined.

Further, in this effect example, when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed for the same effect, one of the timer notice displays may be displayed in a large size, or both. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Further, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer of "03:00", and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed with, for example, "3 seconds left". A countdown may be displayed.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 43, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to 43 (A8), the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. You will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display has 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. It is changed to approximately the center of device 208. In this production example, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this production example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer advance notice display TM1 is added to the timer display. Is enlarged and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the timer notice display in which the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged is displayed. It may be overlapped with TM1. Further, the condition for enlarging the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display, and when the timer display changes, for example, when the time in the timer display is shortened, the countdown is stopped, or the like. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A5), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the timer display countdown is restarted.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 43 (B1) to 43 (B7), the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, the left symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped, and the right symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "attention" to attract attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (B3), when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and "00:00" is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol is displayed to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo-continuous production by this pseudo-continuous pattern is continuously performed from FIG. 43 (B3) to FIG. 43 (B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (B4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is restarted thereafter. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped at the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and then the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (B7).

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 44 (A1) to 44 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the rank of the notice is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A2).

FIG. 44 (A3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (A3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 The color of the frame has been changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot has increased. Then, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the timer display countdown is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is displayed. Here, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the jackpot. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by changing the mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 44 (A6), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 44 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. In this cut-in display, along with the princess character, the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), in response to the timer advance notice display TM1 being ranked up, the character display of "expected large" is added. As a result, it is easier to win a big hit than when a cut-in display without the character display of "expected large" is displayed. The character display of "expected large" may or may not be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on the condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. You may. In this production example, the character display of "expected large" is more likely to be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (A7), the display of the variable icon h0 is also changed to display the notice. The change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the advance notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is promoted, or the timer advance notice. The rank-up of the display TM1 itself may function as a notice of chance-up. Further, by increasing the rank of the timer notice display TM1, it may be notified in advance that the expectation that a notice with high reliability of the big hit is displayed has increased.

Further, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. It may suggest that the design of the reach in is likely to be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is produced by "decoration 2" in which the probability change jackpot is not confirmed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and if the jackpot is reached, the probability variation jackpot is achieved. May change to the reach of "decoration 7", which is likely to be a big hit.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 44 (B1) to 44 (B7) show how the effect using the chance-up meter is started when the timer advance notice effect is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44 (B2), in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP, the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B3).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice of chance up due to the appearance of Boy's character BOY is being given. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (B4), when the Boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the Boy character BOY stands out. That is, by reducing the timer notice display TM1 to display, it may be possible to prevent the display of the Boy character BOY from being disturbed, and that the Boy character BOY has given notice of a chance increase. It may be easily recognizable. Even if the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (B4). The timer display countdown may be interrupted while the reduced display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 44 (B4) to 44 (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (B7), when the notice of chance up by the boy character BOY is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size while the chance-up notice is being given to notify that the chance-up notice is being given. The purpose may be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 45 (A1) to 45 (A3) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when shifting to the super reach. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "21:37" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes the display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the central portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A3'), the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed to make the super reach effect stand out.

In this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the production shift to the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 45 (A2) is displayed. May be good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Further, even when the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). The size may be displayed or displayed larger than the size initially displayed).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 45 (B1) to 45 (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "27:37" and counting down the timer display.

FIG. 45 (B2) shows that the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "25:34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 has at least a part overlapped by the second large board behavior accessory 224 Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224 Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the non-overlapping state. It is said that TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end portion of the center of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. If the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display position may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed accordingly. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 45 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (center portion at the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (B7). The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. , The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be moved. After starting the movement to the original position, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may start the operation of returning to the initial position.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 45 (C1) to 45 (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C1), the timer notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C2), it is shown that the “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and is in the reach state. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , Navi character YM and hold icon h11 are framed out and hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-mentioned chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 46, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 46 (A1) to 46 (A10) show how the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "21:37" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player can lower it. It has been notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. It may be displayed in.

After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed and its display position is displayed as shown in FIG. 46 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper part of the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being reduced, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A5), the characters "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the upper key to enlarge the timer notice display TM1. Then, it is displayed in the original size, and it is notified that the display position also returns to the original position.

After that, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size as shown in FIG. 46 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46 (A7), the guide display is performed in which the characters “reduce timer” are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 46 (A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is the default display size and the default display position, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A8) shows that the animation display of the duel scene is continuing. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (A9), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. , It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. The display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the timer display is reduced, the display size returns to the default display position at this timing. Alternatively, the display may remain reduced at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (A10), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", indicating that the countdown is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 46 (B1) to (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B2).

FIG. 46 (B3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then FIG. 46. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as the left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as the right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays on these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (B5), they indicate "13:56", respectively. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame is changed to red, but the color of the frame does not have to be changed, and the case where the color of the frame is changed to red is the case of the frame. It may be easier to make a big hit than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of the frames of the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, when the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 46 (B6), the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R as shown in FIG. 46 (B7). Instead, the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B8), it is shown that the decorative pattern display device 208 is displaying a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect performed when the countdown of the timer display on one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L) is completed, and the reliability of the jackpot is high. It notifies that it will be promoted to a higher reach production. It should be noted that the effect may be performed when the countdown of the timer display in both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 46 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he is accompanied by a panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (B9), a notice display showing how the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP swordsman reach It informs that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased. This Copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display on the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this production example, the chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is provided corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can also be said that the chance-up production is being performed even in the developed reach production.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47 (A1) to 47 (A5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 47 (A1) to 47 (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryobako accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. The indicated "1" is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A2).

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display is divided into two. After the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed, the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A4), "13: 56 ”is shown. Although the timer display countdown continues even during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of divisions of the timer notice display is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to their initial positions, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to 47 (B5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 47 (B1) to 47 (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, an EL, a 7-segment display, a lamp, and a drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-see state and a difficult-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “18:19” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down. In addition, a timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display is set to "0" in the timer advance notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In that case, an effect such as a chance-up notice may be performed, and even if the timer display becomes "0" in the timer advance effect on the mini display device 208P, an effect such as a chance-up notice is performed. In some cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display has 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time indicated by the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a timer notice display. The character "UP" indicating that the timer is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (B4), a time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer advance notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the countdown of the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the display screen is difficult to see due to the shutter member. In this effect example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added with time, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is terminated, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect in the mini display device 208P may not be completed, and the timer display may be counted down thereafter.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

An example of the effect shown in FIGS. 48 (A1) to 48 (A10) is a state in which the timer advance notice effect is notified by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared before the start. Shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer advance notice preparation effect is started. The timer advance notice preparation effect is intended to give the player a sense of expectation by displaying that the preparation is in progress until the timer advance notice effect starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A3) shows that the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 to notify the fact. That is, in this production example, it is a production performed as one mode of the look-ahead notice for notifying that the timer notice production will be performed in the hold. It should be noted that the change notice may be used to give notice that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size and becomes a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation may be displayed in which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves while being reduced, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 does not have to be reduced and displayed, and the display position does not have to be changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1". At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A7), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. The symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that was the target of pre-reading.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer is displayed from the display of "STANDBY". It is shown that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has been started. When changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1, the animation that the timer notice display TM1 moves while expanding may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the enlarged display and then the display position may be changed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing at which the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has started.

After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display at a specific time (for example, "03:00") or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may change from a small size to a large size.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 48 (B1) to 48 (B8), a plurality of clock notice icons MI1 that function as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer notice production is performed for the number of stocked clock notice icons MI1. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold icon h13 is displayed. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B2), a state in which "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. A clock notice icon MI1 is added to this "decoration 3", indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, the notice icon MI1 of two or more clocks may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B3), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 1" indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that the time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the clock advance notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the number of stocks is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B4), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, it is shown that the navigation character notice is being given by the navigation character YM. This navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The navigation character notice in this production example functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice production is performed in the hold. As described above, the number of clock notice icons MI1 stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of the clock notice icon MI1 to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7”. Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B6), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B7), it is shown that one of the three stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock has been digested and the timer notice effect has been started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and it is suggested that the chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Further, in this production example, one clock notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect, but two clock notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. You may do it. Further, in this production example, one timer notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B7'), the clock notice icon MI1 is used. The timer notice effect may be started without digestion.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a movement animation. When the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen from the beginning. ..

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 22 (1)].
The first display includes a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (11) to (12), or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 21 (a5). Decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device, such as lever effect shown in FIG. 21 (c2) and notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as chance symbol shown in FIG. 23 (9fa'). 208L, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M, 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N, effect display using mini display device 208P] is a display that notifies the timing of execution.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5)].
The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect is started changes [for example, the navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5). "Addition" and "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5), the timer notice effect on the timer notice display TM1 is performed. When it is broken, a timer is added to the effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, even if the first display notifies the time until a certain effect is started, the second display foretells that the time notified will change. Don't just wait for the time to start a certain production, but also enjoy the first display with the expectation that the time may change. You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing when a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may only foretell that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, and also foretells other than the change in the timing at which a certain effect is started. It may be a thing. In addition, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change. It may be a thing.

Further, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may always be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). (Start, etc.), and the countdown of the countdown display may have started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may mean that the first display is hidden, or that the countdown display is hidden (for example, the number is erased and "attention" is displayed. It may be (including the displayed state), it may be that the countdown by the countdown display is completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. (For example, the character display of "attention") may be hidden.

Further, "It is configured so that the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5). After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, the time is added on the timer display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, the display mode of the first display may be changed only after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may also be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may change after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display changes only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means.
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. , It may be possible to focus on both of the two display means without focusing the line of sight only on the first display means.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on a display other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A2) to 26 (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the second display means may overlap with the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. It may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to reach may change.

Here, the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap only the first display means, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap. Depending on the display means, display means other than the first display means may also overlap. Further, the first display means may always overlap with the second display means on which the second display is displayed, and the second display means on which the second display is displayed may cause the first display means to overlap. One display means may not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed may overlap. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps with the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At the position where it overlaps the front side in the substantially center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of the above may also be configured to be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may move between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be configured to be movable other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

Further, the second display means may overlap with the first display means only at the second position, or may overlap with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. May be good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to (7)].
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be such that only the timing until a certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may also be performed by the countdown. .. Further, the countdown display may be such that the timing until a certain effect is performed is always performed by the countdown, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. Good.

Further, "Even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown other than the countdown by the countdown display is continued. There may be something. Further, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. May be good.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. May be good.

In addition, "During the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (8)".
The third display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When the first display indicates 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the countdown by the first display may further enhance the expectation for the third display.

Here, when the first display shows 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display shows 0, the third display may be displayed. Display other than may be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display indicates 0, and the third display may be displayed except when the first display indicates 0. The display of three may be displayed.

In addition, "when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12)].
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Further, a certain effect may always include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3)].
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation.
The first operation is a directing operation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect capable means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the effect movable means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Further, a certain effect may always include the first operation, or may not include the first operation.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 20 (11) to 20 (11) to FIG. When the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. May be good.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (14) and the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12). Pseudo-continuous production shown in Fig. 29 (4) and notice display of chance up shown in Fig. 29 (4) and Fig. (13)].
In the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be started.
The fifth display is a notice display, and is
When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 16 (9) to 16 (14)). When the conversation notice shown in is given, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the conversation notice is not given],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. is there.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, only the fifth display may be started to be displayed, or the first display may be displayed. In the period from the start of the display to the start of the display, the display other than the fifth display may also be started. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started to be displayed. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

Further, the fifth display may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, or the first display may be displayed. The fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the start of the display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A1)].
The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the chance up meter CMT is lined by the swordsman reach. It may be displayed during the specified period, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP3 at which the advance notice by the lever effect is started, which is shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started.
The period display may be erased after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2), a check is performed. If the cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) is displayed before the timing shown by point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing is near. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to the display means to see the period display. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, a plurality of types of displays may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the period is before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

The period during which the period display is displayed may be during the symbol variation display, the jackpot game, the demo display, the symbol stop display, or the like, regardless of the reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed at the time of long reach and may be displayed at the time of SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach, but may be displayed in the latter half of the SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the latter half of the SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is finished. Good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect in which the period is displayed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. Further, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is finished. There may be. Further, when the chance up meter can be displayed / hidden by the operating means, the start of the period display is the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operating means, and the period display is started. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display suggesting that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter). It may be until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the period display includes not only the one displayed until the first timing is reached, but also the one that is erased before the first timing is reached.

Further, for a certain period, there may be two or more in the period during which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended at certain periods, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, display of a cut-in of an old man shown in FIG. 33 (A2), display of an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b), etc.] And
The second effect display is different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to 33 (A2) and 33 (A2b), a chance up meter. In the production by CMT, the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) may be displayed before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3. Yes, etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), there is a chance. In the production by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the grandfather's cut-in shown in FIG. 33 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) are not notified, etc.],
While the second effect display is being displayed, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), FIG. 33 (A2) is shown. When the cut-in of the grandfather is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing. There may be.

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. You may. Further, the period display may not always notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

Further, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may always be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the display of the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be deleted only while the second effect display is being displayed, and the period display may be deleted other than while the second effect display is being displayed.

In addition, instead of the effect display, it may be a notification other than an error such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card. Further, as the mode of the effect display, the display may be displayed by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, "the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33 (A2) or displaying an effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b)]. is there,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display of the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, which suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is a second movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 33 (A3b)].
The second operation is a directing operation.
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33 (A2b)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect movable means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the second operation may be performed, or during the display of the second effect display, an operation other than the second operation may be performed. You may. Further, the second operation may always be performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

Further, "One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIGS. 15 (E1) to 15 (E2) and the operation shown in FIG. 15 (F1). Operation of Senryobako accessory 224H, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the period display is configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2a) to (A3a), the character of the princess. After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations about the redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is deleted, the display other than the period display is displayed again. It may be configured. In addition, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is deleted, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is deleted. You may.

Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is deleted, or the period display may be displayed again even after the period display is deleted. May be good.

Further, "after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, until a certain period elapses. It may be configured so that a display other than the period display is not displayed. Further, after the period display is deleted, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, the period until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses only after the period display is deleted, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is deleted. The period display may be configured not to be displayed until.

In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is deleted in the first certain period, the period display is displayed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be visible when a second period after the first period is started. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

Also, "The certain period is the period during which Super Reach is being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of champ-up by displaying the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4), the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13). Notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is different from the first effect display.
The period display is the second timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ-up by the display of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29 (4) is started, and the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13). The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP2, which starts the notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.] may also be notified.
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may notify only the second timing, or may also notify timings other than the second timing. Further, the period display may always notify the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be such that only the display of the third effect display may be started, or the display other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be a thing. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started.

The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

Further, the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to the reach may be fixed, such that when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed so that the effect display is performed three times and the effect display is performed only once at other times. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", and conversely, it may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. In addition, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be the timing after the first timing, the second timing may be the timing before the first timing, and the first timing and the second timing may be used. The two timings may be the same.

Further, "The first effect display is the first notice display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 29 (18)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see" means "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means is the first display means, and is
The first display means is a means that may display the period display.
The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
The second display means may overlap at least a portion of the period display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be composed of only a plurality of display means, or may be composed of other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display a display other than the period display. Further, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

Further, the second display means may be one that may perform only the effect operation, or may be one that may perform an operation other than the effect operation. In addition, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may not perform the effect operation.

Further, the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display, or the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display. There may be. Further, the second display means may always overlap at least a part of the period display, and the second display means may not overlap at least a part of the period display. May be good.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to 38 (A9)].
The first display and the second display are different displays.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 It may change depending on the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]
At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 38 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds]. It may change depending on the speed at which it disappears, etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In recent years, many displays have been displayed on the display means, and there has been a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who plays the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this game table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player naturally guides the line of sight to the fast (slow) display in which the display mode changes, and the player having the above problem. May also be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

Further, "the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38 (A1)].
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38 (A4)].
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meters MT1 and FIG. 38 (for example) shown in FIG. 38 (A1). The gauge of the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4) decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change in the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the first display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the second display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may change the display mode only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may change according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. You may. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

Further, "In some cases, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to 38 (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather in the conversation notice are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the production lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be other than both the first display and the second display. May be good. Further, both the first display and the second display may always be displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38 (A9)".
One of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 38 (A9)].
The third display and the fourth display are different displays.
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses.
When the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may be displayed.
When the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that only a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode may be changed until the first time elapses. Other display modes may also be changeable. Further, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, the second display may be such that at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode is not changed until the second time elapses. The display mode of is also changeable. Further, the second display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. It may not be the one that may not be.

Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the first display starts to be displayed. Over time, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed. , The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may be displayed after the second display starts to be displayed. As time passes, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may always be displayed, or when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower in the fourth display. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same in the third display and the fourth display.

Further, "the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1)].
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of a pseudo-continuous effect] is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40 (A1). And the second timer notice display TM2 notifies the time until the pseudo-ream occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, "an operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided.
The first display is an operation validity period display.
The second display is the operation validity period display, and is
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that has an aunt who is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may indicate a period other than the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 35 (A1)].
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35 (A1)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing at which the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 35 (A2) is started].
The first timing is a certain effect in the first period [for example, the period during which the duel scene is animated in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 35 (A1) to 35 (A2)] [for example, FIG. 35]. It is the timing when there is a possibility that the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in (A2)] will be performed.
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be for notifying only the first timing, or may be for notifying other than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period. It may be something that can be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started to be displayed in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started to be displayed in the first period. You may.

Further, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period is between the start and the end of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start to the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified other than the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, "with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed, or with the passage of time, the display mode of the second display may change. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, and at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Further, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display modes of the second display may change at the first speed, or at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. Other than some display modes may change at the first rate.

In addition, "when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed". Is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even if the mode changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38 (A1) to 38 (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display is an effect display [for example, display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38 (A4) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)].
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to 41 (A7), a timer notice display is displayed. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display changes from the first display mode [for example, the small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A1)] to the second display. The mode may change to [for example, a large-sized display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A3)].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this game table, the countdown display itself may be attracting attention by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by other than counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be something to do. Further, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown, or may not notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown. There may be one.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and other than during the display of the countdown display, the first display mode may be changed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

The countdown display may be a timer display.

Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. You may. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown ends. Good.

Further, "The countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (1) to (7). , Timer notice display The countdown display in the timer display of TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, so that the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be completed by the time the symbol variation display is completed. In addition, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be always terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may not end by the time the variable display ends.

Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be terminated only until the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may end other than until the variation display ends.

In addition, "the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size [for example, small size].
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, a large size].
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by increasing the display size of the countdown display, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (attention is paid to the countdown display with the increased display size).

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be the display mode that is displayed. Further, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. It may be the display mode shown. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

The size of the display size may be the same. For example, the display size may be the same, but the color and shape of the frame, characters, and the like may be different.

Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, "when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (3)", the first item is described. The display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than one display mode. Further, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, and when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first. There may be cases where it is not displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20 (2)", the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and the first display may be displayed in the first display mode other than when the display of the first display is started. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 41 (A2) to FIG. (A3) show. As described above, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are displayed during the display of the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect that the display mode will change during the countdown display.

Here, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode, and during the display of the countdown display, the first display is the first. The display mode of the above may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode without fail. Further, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode other than the countdown display. The display mode may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail.

In addition, "the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, as compared with the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, the jackpot symbol will be displayed more easily in the end.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the first display will change to the second display mode.

When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed from the above to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which the display position may change. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from approximately the center on the right side of the display screen of 208 to approximately the center],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the display position of the first display, a visual change may be given and the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one in which something other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or one in which the display position may not change.

Further, "When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3). ), When the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw more attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When the display mode is changed to the second display mode, a display position other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may be changed only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed even in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1] may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is animated by an enlarged display. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the movement display is performed, or a display other than the movement display may be performed. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, the movement display may change only the display position of the first display, or the movement display may change the display position of something other than the display position of the first display. May be good. Further, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, or the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. ..

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, or the display position of the first display may change due to something other than the movement display. Good.

In addition, "While the movement display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than while the movement display is being displayed.

In addition, "During the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the movement display is not displayed.

Further, "The countdown display is a display that counts down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may only count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform a countdown other than the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, "By displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, FIGS. 41 (A7) to 41 (A8) show. As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is the timing when a certain effect is performed, or by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. , It may be notified that it is not the timing when a certain effect is performed. Further, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect, and by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified. It may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect only by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, and other than displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. Also, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, "The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A7) to 41 (A11). After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the production may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

Here, it may be configured so that only the countdown display is deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display. The display of may also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41 (A8)".
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 41 (A7) to the same. As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 displays the character "attention" instead of the timer display, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, when the countdown display is erased, the second display is displayed, so that the effect of the effect on the erasure of the countdown display may be improved.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not always be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. Is displayed, after the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be deleted. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. Is displayed, the countdown display may not be cleared after the second display is displayed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted after the second display is displayed only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be configured to disappear after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display is cleared even after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A1), small. The size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. Is displayed, the first display may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means in cases other than the above.

In addition, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A2) to 42 (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol. Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be visually interesting and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, the first display means the second display means when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. It may be displayed on a display means other than the above. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display becomes the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. The first display is the second display even when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is not changed to the second display mode. It may be displayed on the display means of.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is a display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)].
The certain display may be displayed in the second aspect [for example, the aspect including the display of "10:00" as the timer display shown in FIG. 20 (2)].
The display in the second aspect is a display including a timer display [for example, a display of "10:00" as a timer display shown in FIG. 20 (2)].
By counting down the numerical value in the timer display, the timing at which a certain effect is performed is notified [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (13), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
The timer display represents a certain numerical value (hereinafter, referred to as "first numerical value [for example," 05:89 "etc.]") (hereinafter, "first timer display [for example, FIG. 22 (3)). Shown, timer notice display TM1 may be displayed as "05:89" timer display, etc.] ".
The timer display represents a certain numerical value different from the first numerical value (hereinafter, referred to as "second numerical value [for example," 15:00 "etc.]") (hereinafter, "second timer display"). [For example, the timer display of "15:00" in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 22 (5), etc.]] may be displayed.
The second numerical value is larger than the first numerical value.
A certain state after the start of the numerical countdown in the timer display and before the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5)) There is a case where the second timer display is displayed after the display of the first timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example, FIG. 22 (Fig. 22). 1) As shown in FIG. 7 (7), the timer addition effect is performed after the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started and before the timer display becomes "00:00" and the pseudo-ream is started. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is added and changed from "05:89" to "15:00" due to the timer addition effect.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "In the first case, at least a display suggesting that the second timer display is displayed before the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter," second display [for example, ", for example," 22 (2) to the timer addition effect shown in FIG. 22 (5)] ”is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to (5), the timer notice display TM1. When the timer notice effect is being performed, the timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The certain display is a display displayed on the first display means.
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A2) to 26 (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps with the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At the position where it overlaps the front side in the substantially center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "Even in the state where the second display is displayed, the countdown of the numerical value in the timer display is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "During the display of the second display, the countdown of the numerical value in the timer display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The countdown of the timer display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown of the timer display is completed by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 20 (1) to (7)). As shown in the above, the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (8)".
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When the display indicating 0 is displayed in the timer display, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (8), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. When it reaches 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the second timer display is displayed after the first timer display is displayed, the second timer display is not displayed after the first timer display is displayed. In the end, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of displays is the fourth display [for example, the pseudo-continuous production shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12)].
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3)].
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation.
The first operation is a directing operation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 20 (11) to 20 (11) to FIG. When the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The timer display is a display that suggests the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to (13), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1. By the countdown in, the timing of the pseudo-ream is notified, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "By displaying a display indicating 0 in the timer display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, FIGS. 20 (7) to 20 (13) show. As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the timer display, the timer display is deleted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (7) to (10), the timer in the timer notice display TM1". After the display becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, when the above-mentioned display is displayed in the first aspect [for example, the aspect including the character display of "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared, which is shown in FIG. 48 (A4)]. There is
The display of the first aspect includes a character display [for example, a character display of "STANDBY" indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared, which is shown in FIG. 48 (A4)]. Is a display
The display in the first aspect is a display in a mode that does not include the timer display.
The certain character display is a character display indicating that preparations are being made.
When the certain display is displayed in the second aspect after being displayed in the first aspect (hereinafter, "the second case [for example, shown in FIGS. 48 (A3) to (A9)). As described above, when "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and then "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, etc.] ") is displayed.
In the second case, after the certain display is displayed in the first aspect, the certain display starts the moving display, and after the moving display is finished, the certain display is the first. The countdown of the timer display is started after the second aspect is changed from the aspect [For example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A3) to (A9), "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. After that, the timer notice display TM1 starts the movement display, and after the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 ends, the timer notice display TM1 changes from "STANDBY" to "10:00" and then the timer display counts down. Is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the certain display may be started in the second aspect without being displayed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), the timer notice display TM1 Is not started to be displayed at "STANDBY" but is started at "10:00" as a timer display],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the movement display of the certain display may be started while the countdown of the timer display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer notice is given. During the countdown of the timer display on the display TM1, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 has been changed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (2)].
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display of a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5)].
One of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20 (8)].
The first display may be displayed in the second mode [for example, the mode including the display of "10:00" as the timer display shown in FIG. 20 (2)].
The first display of the second aspect is a display of an aspect including a timer display [for example, a display of "10:00" as a timer display shown in FIG. 20 (2)].
When the numerical value (hereinafter referred to as "timer value") in the timer display is counted down and the timer value becomes a third numerical value [for example, "00:00"], the third display is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (8), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is counted down and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice is given. "Attention" characters are displayed on the display TM1],
The third display is a display foretelling that a certain effect [for example, the effect of the pseudo-ream shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (13)] will be performed [for example, FIG. 20 (8)). -As shown in Fig. (13), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed with the characters "attention" to encourage attention to the notice (pseudo-ream), etc.],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice effect regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The timer value may be displayed as the first numerical value [for example, "05:89", etc.].
The timer value may be displayed as a second numerical value [for example, "15:00"].
The second numerical value is larger than the first numerical value.
The second display may be displayed after the timer value countdown is started and before the timer value reaches the third value [for example, FIGS. 22 (1) to 22 (5). ), The timer display becomes "00:00" after the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer is added before the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Is displayed, etc.],
The second display is a display for notifying that the timer value changes from the first numerical value to the second numerical value.
After the display of the second display is started, the timer value changes from the first value to the second value [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22 (2) to 22 (5)). After the timer addition effect is started, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is added and changes from "05:89" to "15:00", etc.],
The second display is a display displayed in the symbol variation display in which the display of the timer display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display.
The countdown of the timer value may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (D1) to (D3), the timer display may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Countdown is interrupted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means.
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (A2) to 26 (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps with the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At the position where it overlaps the front side in the substantially center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "Even when the second display is displayed, the countdown of the timer value is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "During the display of the second display, the countdown of the timer value is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The countdown of the timer value is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown of the timer value is completed by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 20 (1) to (7)). As shown in the above, the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the first display is displayed in the "third mode [for example, the mode in which the frame color of the timer notice display TM1 on which the timer display is displayed is red, which is shown in FIG. 25 (C2)]. In some cases,
The first display of the third aspect is a display of an aspect including the timer display [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (C2), the timer display of "05:89" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Displayed, etc.],
During the execution of the timer value countdown, the first display may change from the second aspect to the third aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (C1) to 25 (C2), the timer. The color of the frame of the notice display TM1 has changed from white to red, etc.],
When the mode of the first display changes from the second aspect to the third aspect, the mode of the first display does not change from the second aspect to the third aspect. Rather, it is easier to finally confirm and display in the jackpot symbol mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the timer value changes from the first value to the second value, the timer value does not change from the first value to the second value. Finally, it is easy to confirm and display in the big hit design mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the above-mentioned certain effect is a pseudo-continuous notice effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20 (9) to (12)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryobako accessory 224H, 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 21 (d3)].
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation.
The first operation is a directing operation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "operating means [for example, effect lever 136V, etc.] is provided.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "operation promotion display [for example, display of lever image 136V shown in FIG. 38 (B10)]").
The certain effect is an effect including the display of the operation promotion display [for example, a notice by the lever effect including the display of the lever image 136V shown in FIGS. 38 (B10) to (B11)]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, it is easier to finally confirm and display in the jackpot symbol mode than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 20 (11) to 20 (Fig. 20) to FIG. When the pseudo-ream shown in (12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The third numerical value is 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, in the case of "a state in which two of the first displays are displayed [for example, a state in which two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 40 (B2)" (hereinafter, , "Third case")
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "In the third case, the timer value changes from the first numerical value to the second numerical value only for one of the two first indications [for example, FIG. 40 (Fig. 40). As shown in B3) to the figure (B4), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is added by 10 seconds, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "19:00". Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the first display is displayed in the "first mode [for example, the mode including the character display of" STANDBY "indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, etc., shown in FIG. 48 (A4)"]. In some cases,
The first display of the first aspect is a display of an aspect including a certain character display.
The first display of the first aspect is a display of an aspect that does not include the timer display.
The certain character display is a character display indicating that preparations are being made.
When the first display is displayed in the second aspect after being displayed in the first aspect (hereinafter, "in the second case [for example, in the case of FIGS. 48 (A3) to (A9)). As shown, when "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and then "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, etc.] ")".
In the second case, the first display starts the moving display after the first display is displayed in the first aspect, and the first display starts the moving display after the moving display ends. The countdown of the timer value is started after the first aspect is changed to the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (A3) to (A9), "STANDBY" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Is displayed, the timer notice display TM1 starts the movement display, and after the movement display of the timer notice display TM1 ends, the timer notice display TM1 changes from "STANDBY" to "10:00" and then the timer. Display countdown starts, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first display may be started in the second aspect without being displayed in the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 20 (2), a timer notice display may be started. TM1 does not start displaying at "STANDBY" but starts displaying at "10:00" as a timer display],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the movement display of the first display may be started while the timer value is being counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A2) to 41 (A3), the timer may be started. During the countdown of the timer display on the notice display TM1, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 has been changed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"First effect [For example, the effect shown in FIG. 25 (C1) in which a balloon displaying the characters" timer notice level UP "is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the effect shown in FIG. 27 (C1). 2 The effect of displaying the characters "additional 10 seconds" on the decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to (A2) An effect of moving in a direction close to each other, an effect of displaying the time added to the timer display around the rotation area of the LED array of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28 (C2), shown in FIG. 43 (A2). An effect in which a balloon displaying the characters "additional" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, an effect in which an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 46 (B4), etc.] can be executed. Directing means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying the timer display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc. ]When,
It is a game table equipped with
The timer display is a display including a display in which the timer value is subtracted.
The timer display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the aspect in which the frame color of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 25 (C1) is white, and the timer shown in FIG. 27 (C1). A mode in which the display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a mode in which the timer display is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 28 (A1). 28 (C2) shows the mode in which the timer display is displayed on the POV display 224I, FIG. 43 (A3) shows the mode in which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a normal size, and FIG. 46 (B4) shows. The mode in which only one timer notice display TM1 is displayed, etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the aspect in which the frame color of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 25 (C2) is red, and the timer shown in FIG. 27 (C4). The mode in which the display is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display shown in FIG. 28 (A4) is displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Aspect, a mode in which the timer display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (C5), a mode in which the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 43 (A4) is enlarged and displayed, FIG. The mode in which the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R are divided into two and displayed as shown in B5)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which at least aspects other than the value of the timer value are different.
The first effect is an effect executed in connection with the timer display.
In connection with the start of the first effect while the timer display is displayed in the first aspect, the timer display is changed to the second aspect and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "At least a part of the colors of the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect are different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (C1) to 25 (C2)). Before and after the timer notice effect, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 has changed from white to red, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The timer display in the first aspect and the timer display in the second aspect have different sizes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to (A6), a timer advance notice effect. Before and after, the size of the timer notice display TM1 has changed from the normal size to the enlarged size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect have different display positions of the timer display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to (A6). , The display position of the timer notice display TM1 has changed before and after the timer notice effect],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the timer display of the first aspect is a display of an aspect including displaying the timer display of the first number [for example, one or the like].
The timer display of the second aspect is a display of an aspect including displaying a timer display of a second number [for example, two or the like].
The first number and the second number are different numbers [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (B3) to (B5), the number of timer advance notice display TM1 before and after the effect image is displayed. Is changing, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display.
The subtraction of the timer value may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (D1) to (D3), the timer display may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Countdown is interrupted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the subtraction of the timer value is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the subtraction of the timer value is completed by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 20 (1) to (7)). As shown in the above, the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "even when the first effect is being executed, the subtraction of the timer value is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "During the execution of the first effect, the subtraction of the timer value is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "When the timer value is subtracted and the timer value becomes 0, the advance notice effect is executed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display countdown is performed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and it is announced that the pseudo continuous effect will be started. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "Even if the timer display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect and the timer value becomes 0, the timer display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. in some cases the same the prediction effect as when the timer value becomes 0 is performed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "when the timer display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, it is better than when the timer display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Finally, it is easy to confirm and display in the big hit design mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect for notifying that the timer value is added [for example, the characters" additional 10 seconds "are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 27 (C1)." The effect to be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 28 (A1) to 28 (A2), in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other, shown in FIG. 28 (C2). , A production in which the time to be added to the timer display is displayed around the rotation area of the LED array of the POV display 224I, and a balloon in which the characters "addition" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 43 (A2). Is displayed, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first effect is an effect of notifying that one of the timer displays is divided into a plurality of pieces [for example, an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 46 (B4). Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "at least a mode in which the mode other than the value of the timer value is different" means "a mode in which at least the number of displayed timer displays is different".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the first effect is an effect including the first display [for example, the display of a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 43 (A4)]. Yes,
At least a part of the first display overlaps with the timer display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "an operation means [for example, an operation key unit 137, etc.] that can be operated by a player is provided.
The display mode of the timer display may change depending on the operation of the operating means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (A3) to 46 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a normal size. Sometimes, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, in the above description,
"The first effect [for example, the effect of dividing the timer notice display TM1 into two or more timer notice displays (timer notice display TM1L, TM1R) shown in FIGS. 46 (B4) to (B5)] can be executed. Various production means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
A display means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
The timer display is a display including a display in which the timer value is subtracted.
The timer display is a display including the timer value and a frame display surrounding the timer value [for example, a display of a frame surrounding the timer value shown in FIG. 46 (B3)].
The timer display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the aspect in which the frame color of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 46 (B4) is white, etc.].
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the mode in which the frame color of the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R shown in FIG. 46 (B5) is red, etc.].
The first effect is an effect executed in connection with the timer display.
In the first effect, one of the timer displays displayed in the first aspect is displayed with two or more increases , and at least one timer of the two or more increased timer displays is displayed. The display is an effect of being displayed in the second aspect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (B4) to (B5), the timer notice display TM1 in which the frame color was displayed in white before the division. Is divided into two, and the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1L, TM1R divided into two is changed to red, etc.],
At least the color of the frame display is different between the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
In the first effect, one of the timer displays displayed in the first aspect is displayed with two or more increases , and at least one timer of the two or more increased timer displays is displayed. The display is an effect of being displayed in the second aspect.
Was explained.
Further, "The timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect have different display positions of the timer display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A1) to (A6). , The display position of the timer notice display TM1 has changed before and after the timer notice effect],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "In the first effect, the larger the number of the timer displays after the increase, the easier it is to finally confirm the display in the jackpot symbol mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display.
The subtraction of the timer value may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 25 (D1) to (D3), the timer display may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display. Countdown is interrupted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "the subtraction of the timer value is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the subtraction of the timer value is completed by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 20 (1) to (7)). As shown in the above, the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "even when the first effect is being executed, the subtraction of the timer value is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "During the execution of the first effect, the subtraction of the timer value is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "when the timer value is subtracted and the timer value becomes 0, the advance notice effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "Even if the timer display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect and the timer value becomes 0, the timer display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. Then, the same advance notice effect as when the timer value becomes 0 may be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (2) to 20 (8), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 When the countdown is performed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and it is announced that the pseudo continuous effect will be started.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "In the first effect, the timer value of the timer display after being increased by two or more is the same [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (B5), it is divided into two. Timer notice display The timer values indicated by TM1L and TM1R are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "an operation means [for example, an operation key unit 137, etc.] that can be operated by a player is provided.
The display mode of the timer display may change depending on the operation of the operating means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (A3) to 46 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a normal size. Sometimes, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a look-ahead notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display also functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a look-ahead notice. Here, it may be performed only as a look-ahead notice.

Further, when the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed in the period between the symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped / interrupted / stopped during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the timing of the final stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown). (Not done) or the time notation may be stopped. The time notification by the countdown display may be continued even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown may be performed internally even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally while the symbol stop is displayed.

In addition, when displaying the countdown display as a look-ahead notice, if there is a hold in which the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold with an indefinite fluctuation time), the countdown display is not performed. May be good. This is because if the symbol fluctuation display time is indefinite, it may not be possible to know when the countdown will reach 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (pseudo-ream or reach). In the case of development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variation display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when the hold with an indefinite fluctuation time is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, a telop display such as "super hot approaching", etc. It can be applied in cases where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed by the end of the subject's hold digestion. In addition, a timing that is also when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs (for example, the start of a pending symbol variation display that is a look-ahead target) n The effect is such that the time is forcibly adjusted. May be good.

In addition, the countdown display may be displayed during the jackpot. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, since the period of one round is indefinite during the jackpot game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display may not occur in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final). When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book is forcibly booked. The combined time (for example, "00:00" may be forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display to generate an effect, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, the time until the simultaneous production, the production by the RTC, or the like starts may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be composed of a transmissive liquid crystal, and further, an effect means such as an effect movable means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. They may be configured to be visible via. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured so that the back side can be switched between a state in which the back side can be seen and a state in which the back side is difficult to see by the liquid crystal shutter.

Further, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as the accessory may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display foretelling that the countdown display itself may be affected (for example, timer addition / subtraction, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.). (For example, a production that incites that something may occur due to the mini character, etc.) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen to the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character appears, something is always done. Or you may perform an effect that always does something when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters appearing, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end, or when a notice of chance up is given, it may be easy to make a big hit in the end.

In addition, even if a part or all of the chance-up meter is enlarged / reduced, or a promotion effect (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes, etc.) is performed. Good.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the time until a certain effect is performed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by a display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed.
The second image display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
Even if the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 5.
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7.
The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means.
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 7.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements.
One type of movement among the plurality of types of movements is a directing movement.
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix 10)
The game console described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 9.
When the above-mentioned certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit the jackpot than when it does not occur.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
A hot effect display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The game console described in Appendix 14,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third effect display.
The timing of displaying the third effect display may not be notified by the period display.
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, error notification such as a ball removal error, notification indicating the firing position, notification other than an error such as notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by the LED, and production operation by the accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console described in Appendix 16.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed due to a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured so that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 17.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
During the display of the third effect display, the power output movable means may perform the effect operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 18.
After the period display is hidden, the period display becomes easily visible.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 19.
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 21.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing").
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location for notifying the chance up may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the notification may be made three times, and at other times, the notification may be made only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", or may be more likely to come off. Further, the susceptibility to a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 14 to 22.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display.
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 14 to 23.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
Before the first timing is reached, the third display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at the first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table featuring and.

(Appendix 27)
The game console described in Appendix 26.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is a time display.
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period.
The display of one of the time displays is the first display.
The display of one of the time displays is the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game console according to Appendix 26 or 27.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 28.
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses.
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses.
When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed.
When the second time elapses, the fourth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may be more reliable than the fourth display, and the fourth display may be more reliable than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 26 to 29.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display.
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a timer notice display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The timer notice display is a display that notifies the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
Equipped with operating means
The first type of display is an operation validity period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game console described in Appendix 30.
The first type of display is a period display, and is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 26 to 33.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display.
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game console described in Appendix 35.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to Appendix 35 or 36.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
When the countdown display is displayed, the first display mode is always changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 37.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display mode is changed to the second display mode than when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 39.
The countdown display is started and ended within the period of one symbol change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 40.
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The game console described in Appendix 41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 43.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 by the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
The game console described in Appendix 44.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 45.
It may not change to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 46.
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 48)
The game console described in Appendix 47.
The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 48.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a notice display, and is
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing, and is a display for notifying the first timing.
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The game console described in Appendix 51.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication,
The third display is an effect display, and is
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started.
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game console described in Appendix 52.
The third display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
The game console described in Appendix 53.
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 55)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 52 to 54.
Equipped with a directing movable means that can execute multiple types of movements
One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to the appendices 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured not to be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be re-displayed by the time when the certain period elapses.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 58.
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 60)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 59.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
The fourth display is different from the second display.
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing.
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 51 to 60.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 62)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a display including a countdown display.
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and is a display.
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at the timing when a certain effect is performed.
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 63)
The game console described in Appendix 62.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The game console described in Appendix 63.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the second display size.
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 64.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 65.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, rather than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 67.
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 68.
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game console described in Appendix 69.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix 71)
The game console according to Appendix 69 or 70.
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display changes due to the movement display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
Even while the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
While the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 73.
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console described in Appendix 74.
The timing notification is a notification that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to Appendix 74 or 75.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The game console described in Appendix 76.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 77.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console described in Appendix 78.
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 79.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

FIG. 49 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 49, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

In addition, the mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and further, the mode in which the touch panel is provided on the display means 903. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous stroke operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous press function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured so that there are many effects to be activated, or may be configured so that there are few effects. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 49 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine to use the enclosed ball as a launching ball and pays out the ball. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotating machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 50. Here, FIG. 50 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 50 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 50), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored, and the slot machine 1000 It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 51 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 3B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as the recording medium for recording the game program.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Even if the constituent requirements are included only in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and appendices, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and appendices.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Direction button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 246 Cloaking device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Game board lamp 542 Game underframe lamp

Claims (12)

A production means that can execute the first production,
Display means that can display the timer display and
It is a game table equipped with
The timer display is a display including a display in which the timer value is subtracted.
The timer display is a display including the timer value and a frame display surrounding the timer value.
The timer display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first effect is an effect executed in connection with the timer display.
In the first effect, one of the timer displays displayed in the first aspect is displayed with two or more increases , and at least one timer of the two or more increased timer displays is displayed. The display is an effect of being displayed in the second aspect.
At least the color of the frame display is different between the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The display position of the timer display is different between the timer display of the first aspect and the timer display of the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
In the first effect, the larger the number of the timer displays after the increase, the easier it is to finally confirm the display in the jackpot symbol mode.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display.
The subtraction of the timer value may be interrupted during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The subtraction of the timer value is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the subtraction of the timer value is completed by the end of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
Even when the first effect is being executed, the subtraction of the timer value is continued.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
During the execution of the first effect, the subtraction of the timer value is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
When the timer value is subtracted and the timer value becomes 0, the advance notice effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 8.
Even when the timer value becomes 0 without changing the timer display from the first aspect to the second aspect, the timer display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The same advance notice effect as when the timer value becomes 0 may be executed.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
In the first effect, the timer values of the timer display after being increased by two or more are all the same.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display mode of the timer display may change depending on the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Images